Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 3774 - Contract - All Texas Builders - Mae Simmons Community Center Renovations - 12_12_1991
Resolution No. 3774 December 12, 1991 Item #17 HW:js RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and All Texas Builders for the Mae Simmons Community Center renovations, attached herewith, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 12th day of ATTEST Rane4e-13oy City Secr (APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: C-1 gal �4 &�- at-,, Gene a s, urc as ng anager APPROVED AS TO FORM: arold Willard, -Assistant Cfty Attorney December , 1991. r V www'1�� 1 T kwrA 7u♦ , CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS BID # 11671 «.� CID,/ "J CITY OF LUBBOC 't3� Lubbock, Texas �S SA City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 606-767-2167 BID # 11671 ADDENDUM # 1 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: November 8, 1991 CLOSE: 11/27/91 @ 2:00 P.M. Please amend Contract Documents as per the attached specifications noted under DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL: 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 1: TH YOU, Ron Shuffiel , CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING OFFICE PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID r r r i� SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. INSPECTION: All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon r- delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. PROTECTION DURING STORAGE: The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r MATERIALS: l All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. T PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-1 11 F CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS for TITLE: MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: 23RD 8 OAK BID NUMBER: 11671 PROJECT NUMBER: 1491-552101-9618 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Department r r r r (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) INDEX PAGE 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS..........................................................................................3 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................5 3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS.................................................................10 4. PAYMENT BOND......................................................................... .................14 5. PERFORMANCE BOND..........................................................................................17 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE..................................................................................20 7. CONTRACT..................................................................................................22 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.......................................................................24 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS...............................................................................42 10. SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. ..........43 11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS........................................................................................44 12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE............................................................:.........................45 .2- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) t ' i f` NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1 e. r j*r 6 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID 9 11671 Seated proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock a.m. on the 27th day of November. 1991, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all tabor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Gene Eads, Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 12th day of December, 1991, at Municipal Bldg., Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed 525,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. !" Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is rt further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as F I heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. r F The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a pre -bid conference on 19th day of November, 1991, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Personnel Conference Room #108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. CITY OF LUBBOCK BY: Gene Eads, C.P. Purchasing Manager r r ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 11671 Sealed proposals addressed to Gene Eads, C.P.M., Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 27th day of November, 1991, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Manager at his office and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on 19th day of November, 1991, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., Personnel Conference Room 108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. �'/ I�L f"a-42ff", BY: Gene Eads, C.P.M PURCHASING MANAGER F r (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F 4 � 1 { y GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS f� i C 1 I ,w- t -4- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) y r t GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: Modifications to the Mae Simmons Community Center, 23rd & Oak, Lubbock, Texas. The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the Gen- eral Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 60 (SIXTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so sub- mitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure comple- tion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that sit bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for pro- tecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provi- sion. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against de- fective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished di- rectly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup- pliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Con- tractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materi- als,, supplies,: machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construc- tion, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of�completion to Contractor. The City re- serves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the ma- terials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. -6- r j 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construc- tion of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock: agrees that it will fur- nish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. How- ever, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such under- ground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractors expense. r,. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES i The contractor shalt, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger sig- nals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and Lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and re- placed by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractors responsibility for maintenance of barri- cades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blast- ing. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractors intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE t L The Contractor shalt not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written j -7- notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subroga- tion. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations there- under. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract docu- ments does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construc- tion work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the owner's Representative to do such work. The -- final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's r Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deduc- tions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. -8- I 19. 20. 21. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to in- creases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be re- jected and returned to the bidder without being considered. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, dis- tinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an indi- vidual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the! Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the fol- lowing: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. -9- No Text BID PROPOSAL t (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r RM r 7- F, BID PROPOSAL BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE Lubbock, Texas DATE Nov. 27, 1991 PROJECT NO. 1491-552101-9618 Proposal of ALL TEXAS BUILDERS,INC. (hereinafter called 'Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a Mae Simmons Community Center Renovations Bid #11671 having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other re- lated contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surround- ing the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifica- tions and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part, is as follows: MATERIALS:_ twenty-six thousand sixty-four and no/100 (s *26,064.00* ) SERVICES: Thirty-five thousand nine hundred ninety-two (s *35,992.00* ) TOTAL BASE BID: Sixty-two thousand fifty-six and no/100 (s *62,056.00* ) MATERIALS: One thousand five hundred fourteen and no/100 (s *1,514.00* ) SERVICES: Two thousand sixty and no/100 (s *2,060.00* ) TOTAL ALTERNATE #1: Three thousand six hundred four and no/100 (s *3,604.00* ) (ADD: Concrete Sidewalks and Steps) MATERIALS: One thousand sixteen and no/100 (s *1,016.00* ) SERVICES: One thousand four hundred two and no/100 (s *1,402.00* )- TOTAL ALTERNATE 92:_Two thousand four hundred eighteen & no/100 (s *2,418.00* ) (ADD: Remove/Replace Type "S" Lighting Fixtures) MATERIALS: Three hundred eighty-three and no/100 (s *383.00* ) SERVICES: Five hundred thirty and no/100 (s ) TOTAL ALTERNATE #3: Nine hundred thirteen and no/100 (s *913.00* ) (ADD: Venetian Blinds in Activities Room) MATERIALS: One thousand one hundred forty-three and no/100 SERVICES: One thousand five hundred seventy-eight & no/100 (s TOTAL ALTERNATE 94:_Two thousand seven hundred twenty-one (s (ADD: Interior Re -Painting) $ *1,143.00* MATERIALS: Five hundred sixty-three and no/100 (S *563.00* ) SERVICES: Seven hundred seventy-seven and no/100 (s *777.00* ) TOTAL ALTERNATE 95: One thousand three hundred forty & no/100 (s *1, 340. 00* ) (ADD: Remove/Replace Type "A" Fixtures in the Lobby, and Oak Fascia) MATERIALS: Eight hundred fifty-six and no/100 (s *856.00* ) SERVICES: One thousand one hundred eighty-two and no/100 (S *1,182.00* ) TOTAL ALTERNATE u6: Two thousand thirty-eight and no/100 (s *2,038.00* ) (ADD: Remove/Replace Heat Water Pumps and Compression Tank) Amount shalt be shown in both words and figures. In case of.discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 60 (SIXTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of S100.00 (One Hundred dollars) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more.fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with in- struction number 20 of .the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the,right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned. Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined . the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N / A Dollars (S N/A ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5% of Amount of Bid Dollars (S 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all con- tract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. ALL TEXAS BU 9, INC. �' Contractor !. t` 1 1 (seal if eidd r is wtorporation) �i7. ATTEST: c Secretary -12- s, LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS i 1. . This form shall be completed and submitted with the Bidderls Proposal. r 1. 1. Smith & Sweet, Inc. + 2. Lydick -Hooks Roofing r 3. Lubbock Glass & Mirror l: —" 4. Holley Tile Company S• RPM Drywall, Inc. 6• Paul Graham Company T• Contrs. Fairman-Wall Painting 8• T.R.'s Plumbing 9• Short's Electric r 10. r i Minority Owned Yes No X X X X X X X X X The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND r o D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: P.O. BOX 1227 BALTIMORE, MD 21203 BID BOND h- 7 T KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, -- All Texas__� Builders, Inc. •�'—SOX 34 ere insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Lubbock, TX79452 Principal, (hereinafter called the "Principal"), and___ — it -Ccupa 1y-- ___ , of Baltimore, Maryland, a corporation duly organized (Here insert the name of the Surety) under the laws of the State of Maryland, as Surety; (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Owner) Obligee, (hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in the sum Mt -pf-- ji.------_-r --_-- --Dollars ($__-5% ----- - for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for__ Mae Sirrlons Cammity Center Renovatims ---for---the--Git-Y--(Dlf- -Ltbb©c-k-r-Iubbookr_Te ____- NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter into such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this-__--________26th -- _da of______�v�r______ ,_ t_, , '��T � " A.D. 1991_ ^"'.I TEXPS BUILDERS..:-� . Witness Pre dent Torty--Ratttff-w_-_- _'_ -_--____--"_-- Title pm ident EkFIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT OMPANY • t Surety — - By- - ------ ----- - - - --- (SEAL) Tr ers Witness Joe S o g 7"ttte Cn5a(TX)-2M, 4.91 233926 At{-2'� �In� ct Confo ma In American frwhute of ArehiteUa lkuumcnl A-710, `' February 1970 Fdilwm. Fidelity and Deposit Company OF MARYLAND Fidelity and Deposit Company HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE BID BOND �o w z 0 o z PLEASE READ YOUR BOND 0 �" The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY e Companies Homii. )Ft•'IC.Iis: BALTIMORE. Mu. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY tiVtivt :ILL AIFN— BY THit:s : PRESt:,61: That the FIDEI.TI'Y Atil) MAHYLANf), and the FIDELITY AND Co%n,%%i. couxirations of the State of Nfaryland. by R. W. BUDDENBOHN . Vice -President, and M. J. SCHNEBELEN • Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies. which are set forth on the reverse aide hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appointJoe David Schoenig of Lubbock, Texas ........................... _ to rue and aw u agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, each in a penalty not to exceed the sum of TWO MILLION FIVE HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($2,500,000)... EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Indeepe�ndent Executoy_�_urvivors and_ C}Q�m,n; y ( grd�ns. A�'t a execution o such Winds or undertakings m pursuance these presents, shall e as ending upon sat�ompanies, as fully and amply. to all intents and purposes• as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that issued on behalf of Joe David Senig, etal, dated, April 19, 1988. r 0 0 IN WITNESS WHEREOF. the said Vice -Presidents and Assis ta Oretaries eunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT CO OF MAR and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 7th day March A.D. 1991_ l Ng�ATTEST: FIDEND DE COM NY OF MARYLAND Q;- B -. ✓ • Assistanf �Vice-President \v ' FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY r & l SEAL B„ assistant S Vice -President STATE OF MARYLAND _ CITY OF B.ALTINIORE On this 7 th day of March OO A.D. 199 1 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned aslified. came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same. and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid. and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have her t my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Baltimore the day and year first above written. otary Pubiic CAROL J . FADER i My commission expires Auguit 1. 1922 r' CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND ' DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney r were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI. Section _' of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT l COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July. 1909 and of the Board of Directors ,I the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. i RESOLVED: "'That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter —whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF. I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this t 26thday of Navelnber . 1991. 168-5173 ` t �Sshltant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto.". PAYMENT BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSEP IN TEXAS 2j DATE& BY -14- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) ` The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND o O FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY ' Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160A Bond # 30435088 r OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71ST LEGISLATURE, 1989 (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That, All Texas Builders, Inc., P.O. Box 3486, Lubbock, Texas 79452 (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) t (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Fidelity and Deposit Cc:tpany of Maryland (Here insert the name of the Surety) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas (Here insert the name of the Obligee) (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Sixty Five Thousand, Six Hundred Ninety Dollars and No Cents ---- (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) Dollars (S 65, 690.00 1� for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, r, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12th day of December 19 91, .— to Mae Simmons Ccn minty Center Renovations for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160A of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accor- dance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 19th day of December 19 9l WITNESS: (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) r A EST: J�Z' c IIF CORPORATIONI F r (SEAL) T(SEAL) All Texas �. — ASEAL) (SEAL) _ // Principal ' ' i '; MC FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ❑FIDELITY DEP OMPANY S � , (SEAL) na F'hlers oe oenicr y — In —Fact No Text r The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND 0 D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY r Companies How* OFF crs: BALTIMORF. Ml): 21 rili POWER OF ATTORNEY KxOvc ALI. MF:N Bi TiwsF: PRFSF:N'1',: That the FIDELITY AM) DF:i-osrt,CONIPANY uF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND r l)F:Ptr if, CON11IM', cortxtnttions of the State of Maryland, by R. W. BUDDENBOHN , Vice -President, and M. J. SCHNEBELEN Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies. which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appointJoe David Schoenig of Lubbock, Texas......................................................... to true and lawfulagent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, each in a penalty not to exceed the sum of TWO MILLION FIVE HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($2,500,000)... EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Indeyendent Ex cuo�`sp_. Co�i;ySpurvivors and C g p P An the execution of such bonds or undertakings to pursuance o these resents, shall e as binding u on said Companies. as full- and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of 4 attorney revokes that issued on behalf of Joe David S_Fhoenig, etal, dated, April 19, 1988. O O ° IN WITNESS WHEREOF. the said Vice -Presidents and Assist retaries eunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT CO OF MAR and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 7th day March A.D. 199J— r �o t ATTEST: FIDE) ND DE COM NYO�F MARYLAND .SEAL C. q B _ •—•r Assistanj ary �� Vice -President FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY rSEAL� CX - - ---- B Assistant S Vice -President STATE OF MARYLAND i �-. CITY OF BALTIMORE SS: On this 7th day of March ©OA.D. 199 1 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned an alified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDE LI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same. and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid. and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have her et my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Baltimore the day and year ' first above written. J aor + r" otary Public CAROL J . FADER ��r a My commission expires-&-&Vtss CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy. is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI. Section_' p of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DFPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1909 and of the Board of Directors (,f the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1948. RESOLVED: "flat the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company. whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." l IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this 19th day of Decffnber . 1991. 16 8- 5 17 3 - ssfstant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior _ Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature Of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature _ of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." 7 r fi PERFORMANCE BOND w4D c"EcK LtCrNSE IN TEXAS (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND u FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE. MD. 21203 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160A OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS Bond # 30435088 F AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71ST LEGISLATURE, 1989 Ir (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount) I KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: All Texas Builders, Inc., P.O. Box 3486, Lubbock, Texas 79452 That, and (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) (hereinafter called the, Principal), as Principal, Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland (Here insert the name of the Surety) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, with its principal office in the City of Baltimore, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas (Here insert the name of the Obligee) (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Sixty Five Thousand, Six Hundred Ninety Dollars and No Cents --- (Here insert an amount equal to the total contract price) ---------- --------------- _-------------Dollars ($ 65,690.00 I, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 12th day of December 1091 , to Mae Simms Ccnnunity Center. Renovations for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160A of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provi- sions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 19th day of 1991 WITNESS: (SEAL) � (SEAL) (IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) All Texas Bui . , Inc ATT ST: (SEAL) 3'e�LS4'Z;7�_J (SEAL) (IF CORPORATION) J"n cipa? 99 FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND O FIDELITY A POSIT COMPANY or S ety oe dCvAT i — ers v- a PLEASE READ YOUR BOND 7 The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND e D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies Homi: OFFICI:s: BAL'1'wom;., MI). !I loi POWER OF ATTORNEY KNow ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT,: That the FIDELITY AND DEVOSI ' COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the FIDELITY AND D:r►>;1'1' Ct1SI1'AN1. corporations of the State of Maryland, by R. W. BUDDENBOHN Vice -President, and M. J. SCHNEBELEN Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appointJoe David Schoenig of Lubbock, Texas ......................... e true and lawfulagent and attorney -in -Fact of each, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, each in a penalty not to exceed the sum of TWO MILLION FIVE HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($2,500,000)... EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Inde endent Executors. Community Survivors and Qn3�mtinirjz�jygrtjiapq. An the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall e as binding upon said ompanies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that issued on behalf of Jo David S h enig, etal, dated, April 19, 1988. ,1\.J X IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents and. the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT this 7 th di ATTEST: cretaries reunto subscribed their names and affixed OF MAR ' and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY March , A.D. 192E ND D COM NY OF MARYLAND B("(". 6 V .�_ �o Vice -President FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY �SFJiLy B Assistant Se Vice -President STATE OF MARYLAND i CITY OF BALTIMORE SS: On this 7 th day of March OO A.D. 199 1 , before the subscriber. a Notary Public of the State of :Maryland. in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned at�ualtfied, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same. and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid. and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have her et my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Baltimore the day and year first above written. rorell 'otary Public CAROL J. FADER My commission expires-Augus_l 1292 CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI. Section : of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November. 1978. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this 19th day of_.._r . 19 91. 168-5173 ssistant Secretary EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize _ any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, _ shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature _ of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the. Company thereto." i i T 1610hITY 1-rN CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE -20. (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) FARMERS INSURANCE GROUP OFCOMPANIES Member of The Presidents Council r TRUCK INSURANCE EXCHANGE r- INTERIM CERTIFICATE AS TO EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE This is not an insurance policy. This is only a verification of insurance. ' It does not in any way amend, extend or alter the coverage provided by the r' policies listed below: AGENT 35-77-315 NAMED %All Texas Builders, Inc. INSURED :P.O. Box 3486 GENERAL LIABILITY - 7581 93 83 !� DBA :Lubbock, Tx. 79452 AUTO LIABILITY - 7581 93 82 CARGO LIABILITY - WORKERS COMPENSATION - N2307 01 16 PM We certify that policies for the above named insured are in force as follows: 6 This Interim Certificate As to evidence of Insurance shall expire sixty days from 12:01 A.M. December 19 ,1991, unless cancelled prior to such date by written notice to the named insured. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE LIMITS OF INSURANCE COVERED NOT COVERED BODILY INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE X - General Aggregate Limit (Other than Products/Completed Operations) 1,000,000 r X - Products/Completed Operations Aggregate Limit 1,000,000 Each Occurence 500,000 Personal & Advertising Injury 500,000 r' Fire Damage 4 f Medical Expenses 5,000 AUTO LIABILITY COVERAGE LIMITS OF INSURANCE r, X Owned each Person X - Hired each Accident X Non -Owned Property Damage each Accident X - Employer's Ownership Contingent Liability Sinlgle limit liability for coverages checked X above500.000each Accident CARGO X each Vehicle each occurence RFT S COMPENSATION COVERED NOT -COVERED X - UMBRELLA LIABILITY Umbrella Policy Number- 10.000 retained limit 6900 57 27 2,000,000 each occurence 2,000,000 aggregate If we cancel this Certificate before the expiration date we will mail a ten days written notice to the other interest shown below. Certificate issued to: t City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 12-19-91 (Qg - Date u tersignatu e The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND 0 D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY Companies HOME OFFiclis: BALPIMORE, MI). 2121)3 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY Tul :aF. PRESEMPS: That the FIDELITY AND Dm,osrr Ce1MPANY OFMARYLAND. and the FIDELITY AND M:n)sn, COMPANY. corporations of the State of Maryland, by R. W. BUDDENBOHN , Vice -President, and M. J. SCHNEBELEN Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appointJoe David Schoenig of Lubbock, Texas ......................... to true and lawfulagent and Attornev-in-Fact of each, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, each in a penalty not to exceed the sum of TWO MILLION FIVE HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($2,500,000)... EXCEPT bonds on behalf of Independent ExecutolS y Survivors and Community (:jta_r_d_ _ _ iergs n t e�F execution o suchbonds or undertakings to pursuance of these presents, shall e as binding upon said Companies. as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that issued on behalf of Joe David S�oenig, etal, dated, April 19, 1988. O 0 0 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Presidents and Assist&OFMAR retaries reunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT CO and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY this 7th day/a March A. D. 1991 ATTEST: FIDE D D COM NY OF MARYLAND SFJ1L cX. B Assistan ary �o Vice -President o FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY SE11I Assistant Se Vice -President STATE OF MARYLAND �Li CITY OF BALTIMORE SS: On this 7 th day of March QOO A.D. 199 1 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned at�ualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELI- TY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument. and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid. and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have he t my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Baltimore the day and year first above written. ■m� ♦ .,,��,.+ -otary Public CAROL J. FADER My commission expires An%$.t _1 1992_________ CERTIFICATE I. the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI. Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY. _ This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1909 and of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 2nd day of November, 1978. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company. whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this 19th__day of— DeCerllbe . 19 91. 168-5173 - - - . ssistant Secretary — CONTRACT -22- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) f� l CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this December 12. 1991, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through B.C. McMinn, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and ALL TEXAS.BUILDERIS. INC. of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CON- TRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as fol- lows: 0 MA Alt 'SIC BID* 1"4099wm BID # 11671 - FUIE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS PROJECT IN THE AMOUNT OF f65,690.00. , ��� h I and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documentrat his (or 7 ` f their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, Labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with 7 the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with rthe proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, P Texas in the year and day first above written. ST: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER) G ByJ • _ _ Sec tary MAYOR 7 i APP D AS TO CONTENT: r'•' ALL TEXAS BUILDER'S, INC. R D AS TO FO M: CONTRACTOR r � By: ^ TITLE• %r// COMPLETE ADDRESS: ATTEST: e PO BOX 3488 LUBBOCK TX 79452 .23- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT -24. (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this con- tract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: ALL TEXAS BUILDER'S. INC., who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE rWhenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to CARLOS VIGIL, PARK DEVELOPMENT SUPERVISOR, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect construc- tions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in ... behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any),Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for -his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. r• Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their na- ture, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the Owner's Representative, emd said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. r 6. SUBCONTRACTOR POO The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no re- sponsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments r due Subcontractor. F -25- 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,_ equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu- ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant thatthestructure or project contemplated by the contract docu- ments has been made suitable for use or occupency,or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. — 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative gill check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly — locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract docu- ments. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences _ or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract docu- ments, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. on the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the - progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. -26 t 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commence- ment of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Con- tractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Repre- sentative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representa- tive at Contractor's expense. 14, OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such rstoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direc- tion of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising there- from shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise rela- tive to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Con- tractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (b) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 17 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Con- tractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the na- ture and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of mate- rials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or .— obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis- orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work with- out the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecu- tion and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall fur- nish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ob- servation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. -28- The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such obser- vation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain r, the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give am- ple notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, re- gardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Repre- sentative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representa- tive to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representa- tive, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspec- tions, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as un- suitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and re- build or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is fur- ther agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the owner may make such changes and alterations as the owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the € basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they in- crease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate- rial already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, al- teration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not cov- ered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representa- tive when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is com- menced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this para- graph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as ,foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these mat- ters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machin- ery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and com- pensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other ele- ments of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the. Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Repre- sentative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative in- sists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbi- tration as herein below provided. -30- 7 fti 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that ell work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sans in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any re- quest for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EOUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and r the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein speci- fied, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indem- nify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sus- tained by any person or persons or property, on'account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcon- tractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work pro- gresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assump- tion of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. pow 1 -31. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, in- surance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company au- thorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy _ naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury $250/500,000 _ Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non - owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of poten- tial loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. -32. f. E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance �^ The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of ! (t1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehen- sive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Sub- contractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 limit. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance! policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named in- sured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) con- tained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be accept- able. 29. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness F f -33- shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sun so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, de- vice, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Paten- tee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is speci- fied or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, de- vice, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harm- less from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an in- fringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 31. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, in- sofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 32. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 33. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the con- sideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages -34. r E for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the com- pletion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consid- eration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this local- ity- The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impractica- bility and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sus- tain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 34. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Con- tractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and 1 in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contact, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in C the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the P' Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the sev- eral parts. 35. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shalt not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an ex- tension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after re- ceipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested docu- mentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their con- sideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 36. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays in- 1. cident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge r -35- shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any'part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 37. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals of- fered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 38. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the perfor- mance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the exis- tence or character of the work. 39. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 40. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of de- fective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the con- tract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. -36- r t. 41. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an applica- tion for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for par- tial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound ma- terials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained per- centage due Contractor. 42. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall in- spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in ac- cordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 43. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or be- fore the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this con- tract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special condi- tions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 44. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Con- tractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the -37- date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed de- fects with reasonable promptness. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, Withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, — which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the — Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted other- wise in the contract documents. 48. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to se- lect a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration -- fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the de- cision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should ei- ther party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the ar- biters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated '-- Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. -38- The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to'award the party whose contention is sus- tained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The ar- biters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writ- ing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the or- ders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, requipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any �"• rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as I provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and sup- plies as said owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- pleted by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been com- pleted by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspa- per having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shalt have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. F •39- In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net "— sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin- ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than _ the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorpo- rated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Con- tractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con- tractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the owner and all other sums that may be retained by the owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statu- tory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is fur- ther agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special con- ditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. — -40- 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and au- thority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to ob- serve Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. F 7 -41- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) 6 A , r CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 1 r t: r t. C .42. (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) Resolution #2502 January 8, 1987 Agenda Item #18 11 1 DGV:da RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general :;prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or 'mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock .!in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 ;;enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 123, 1984; and 0 WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order "to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: r BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which :exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents ,land purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades I Exhibit D: Overtime Rate ! Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate ,t :Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing 1 rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken lon behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. 0 ii Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987, { Ranett6,-Boyd, City Secretary a APPROVED T ONTENT: ,, Bi 1 P yne, D rector of Building Services i s� B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: ,�=QR2� - TC cr�l A )JO,- Donald G. Vandiver, First. Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer $11.60 Air Conditioner Installer 8.35 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 5.50 Bricklayer 10.50 Bricklayer -Helper 5.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 5.50 Cement Finisher 7.35 Drywall Hanger 8.70 Electrician 10.50 Electrician -Helper 5.25 Equipment Operator - Heavy 8.00 Light 5.70 Floor Installer 8.00 Glazier. 7.50 Insulator, Piping/Boiler 9.50 Insulator -Helper 5.00 Iron Worker 7.30 Laborer, General 4.75 Mortar Mixer 5.60 Painter 8.75 Plumber 9.25 Plumber -Helper 6.00 Roofer 7.65 Roofer -Helper 4.75 Sheet Metal Worker 8.75 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 5..50 Welder - Certified 8.00 J EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourlv Rate Asphalt Heaterman $5.25 Asphalt Shoveler 4.75 Concrete Finisher 7.35 Concrete Finisher -Helper 4.75 Electrician 10.50 Flagger 4.75 Form Setter 6.50 Form Setter -Helper 5.50 Laborer, General 4.75 Laborer, Utility 5.80 Mechanic 6.50 Mechanic -Helper 6.00 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine 6.00 Bulldozer 5.25 Concrete Paving Machinist 6.50 Front End Loader 5.85 Heavy Equipment Operator 6.40 Light Equipment Operator 6.40 Motor Grade Operator 8.00 Roller 5.25 Scraper 5.25 Tractor 5.50 Truck Driver - Light 5.25 Heavy 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. spccIncArIoms (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) PROJECT MANUAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER CITY OF LUBBOCK TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS 3416 JOLIET AVENUE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79413 SET NO. (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION. . . . . . . . . . . 5 02200 EARTHWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING . . . . . .. 6 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN PLACE CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . 5 DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DIVISION 5 METALS 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK . . . . . . . . 8 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07175 WATER REPELLENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL . . . . . . . . . . . 2 07900 JOINT SEALERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 08710 FINISH HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09300 TILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS . . . . . . . . . 4 09680 CARPETING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 09900 PAINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 10440 SPECIALTY SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . 5 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . 5 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15235 HEATING WATER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15330 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15400 INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15500 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . , . 1 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . 4 16120 CONDUCTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 16140 WIRING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16500 LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . 2 16770 SOUND SYSTEM . . . . . . 7 r Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 i SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. F 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the following: 1. Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. 2. Removal of interior toilet partitions as indicated on drawings. 3. Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove." 4. Removal and protection of existing materials, and equipment items indicated "salvage." 5. Removal of site concrete and other items indicated and as required to install site improvements. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. 2. Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division l Specification Sections. B. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. 1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on -site operations. C. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure — may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. B. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. C. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 2. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 3. Remove protections at completion of work. D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. E. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. F. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 r Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 k .t work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify r, condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. G. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. H. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use objectionable pollution. water when it may create hazardous or conditions such as ice, flooding, and PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in ., areas where such items have not been removed. 3. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 3 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work -- indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish masonry in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - Deliver to Owner," carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. _ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 4 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 5 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) N r Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing of subgrade for concrete sidewalks and steps. B. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. C. Subgrade: The undisturbed.earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. D. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 a qualified independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied. hours, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. a. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Architect, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Owner and utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. B. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 3. Perform excavation by hand within dripline of large trees to remain. Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS, rA. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.2 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backf ill and fill where directed. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess excavated -soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross -sections, elevations and grades as indicated. 3.4 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 7 EARTHWORK L 02200 - 3 pj¢ 1 , Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 1. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase material, satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or a combination. B. Backf ill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. 3.5 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 1. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. B. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 _ inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. C. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry - density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill _material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 0 F F Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 5 11m '.1 8/88 D. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. E. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. 1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557: a. Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. b. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density. c. Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. 2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. a. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. b. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.6 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 indicated or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. C. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. -- 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL _ A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. - 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), — as applicable. a. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. In conjunction with each density - calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017. — b. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 overlaying building slaborpaved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. r' 3. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained. 3.8 EROSION CONTROL A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by Architect. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 FEARTHWORK 02200 - 7 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including sidewalks and concrete steps. B. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. C. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. D. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards:. Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 1. Coordinate with requirements for "Temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. 1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. B. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. — D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. E. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. F. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. G. Liquid -Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss no more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft. / gal. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders. -- b. "A-H 3 Way Sealer"; Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Co. c. "Ecocure"; Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Clear Seal"; A. C. Horn. e. 11J-20 Acrylic Cure"; Dayton Superior. f. "Sure Cure"; Kaufman Products Inc. g. "AR -30" W.R. Meadows. "Spartan -Cote"; The Burke Co. h. "Sealkure"; Toch Div. - Carboline. i. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech. J. "Polyclear"; Upco Chemical/USM Corp. k. "L&M Cure"; L & M Construction Chemicals. 1. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries. m. "LR-152"; Protex Industries. n. "Hardtop"; Gifford - Hill. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 I 0 r 4 . Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC x 2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING 2/89 A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as herein specified. B. Design mix to produce normal -weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, water -reducing or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air -entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 F Copyright 1989, AIA IMASTERSPEC 2/89 mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. -- Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. D. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right — angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane -, (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 7 L. Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 metal keyway -section forms. 2. Where load transfer -slip dowel devices are used, install r, so that one end of each dowel bar is free to move. E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, r' manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, k unless otherwise indicated. F. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. G. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. H. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. I. Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of joints, materials, installation, and performance. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: 1. Broom finish by drawing a fine -hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5 7 Copyright.1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. . E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point - up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. 3.7 CURING — A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving.in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use membrane- _ forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist -curing methods 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed — by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary _ to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after _ placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just before final inspection. END OF SECTION 02520 — PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC r . . l SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5/90 �^ A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including C General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete and mix design. B. Formwork, concrete placement, procedures and finishes are specified in Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88) , "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Normal weight aggregates. 2. Fibrous reinforcement. E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. F. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE r 03300 - 1 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. C. Water: Drinkable. D. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by ,manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 r. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the r work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Air-Tite," Cormix. b. "Air -Mix" or "Perna -Air," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "MB-VR" or "Micro -Air," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. F. n 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. b. "PSI N," Cormix. C. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. 1 e. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. g. G. Fibrous Reinforcement: Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, r- provide one of the following: a. "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc. C. "Forta CR," Forta Corp. d. "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co.' 2.2 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 3 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 designs have been reviewed by Architect. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.35 maximum (air -entrained). Use at all exterior walks and steps. B. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use high -range water -reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. D. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits: 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate. E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturers directions. F. Water -Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water -cement (W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 2. Subjected to deicers/watertight; W/C 0.40. G. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 T' inches. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXING A. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. B. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C) , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. See Section 02520 for execution of concrete paving work. END OF SECTION 03300 U CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE F 03300 - 5 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 r F SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Requirements of this section apply to masonry work specified in Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry". 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedule. B. Types of masonry work required include: 1. Brick masonry. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. B. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. C. Field Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections made for color and textural characteristics, under sample submittals of masonry units and mortar, and to represent completed masonry work for qualities of appearance, materials and construction; build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements: I. Locate mock-ups on site as directed by Architect. 2. Build mock-ups for the following types of masonry in sizes of approximately 4' long by 4' high by full thickness. a. Typical exterior face brick wall. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 l L Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels parallel to existing surface. 4. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples: 1. Unit masonry samples for each type of exposed masonry unit required; include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: _ A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. D.. Store 'aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration by corrosion and accumulation of dirt. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. B. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in.place. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 - Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 C. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. D. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. F. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. G. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. H. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen. 2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. 3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. 4. For clay masonry units with initial rates of absorption (suction) which require them to be wetted before laying, comply with the following requirements. a. For units with surface temperatures above 32 deg.F (0 deg.C), wet with water heated to above 70 deg.F (21 deg.C) S. Perform the following construction procedures while masonry work is progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. 6. In heating mortar materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 degrees F (6 degrees C). `I a. 40 deg.F (4 deg:C) to 32 deg.F (0 deg.C): 1) Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 deg.F (4 deg.C) and 120 deg.F (49 deg.C). b. 32 deg.F (0 deg.C) and lower: 1) Installation of all masonry work shall be stopped. c. Do not heat water for mortar to above 160 deg.F (71 deg.C). UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 7. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. a. 40 deg.F (4 deg.C) to 32 deg.F (0 deg.C): 1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather -resistive membrane. b. .32 deg.F (0 deg.C) to 25 deg.F (-4 deg.C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather -resistive membrane for at least 24 hours. C. 25 deg.F (-4 deg.C) to 20 deg.F (-7 deg.C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather -resistive insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry. d. 20 deg.F (-7 deg.C) and below: 1) Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32 deg.F (0 deg.C) for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared — lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry maintain heated enclosure to 40 deg.F (4 deg.C) for 48 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE: A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each form of brick — required. 1. Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions. a. Standard Modular: 2-1/4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8". 2. For sills, caps and similar applications resulting in exposure of brick surfaces which otherwise would be UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 — Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 concealed from view, provide uncored or unfrogged units with all exposed surfaces finished. B. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, and as follows. 1. Grade SW. 2. Type FBS (normal size and color variations). 3. Compressive Strength: 8,000 psi, average, per ASTM C 67. 4. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Texture and Color: Provide face brick of color and texture to match existing brickwork. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS: A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. `� B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. C. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides ►� and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, colored mortar pigments which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "SGS Mortar Colors", Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. b. "True Tone Mortar Colors"; Davis Colors, A Subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc D. Water: Clean and potable. 2.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES: A. Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other characteristics: 1. Zinc -Coated (galvanized) Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 641 for zinc coating of class indicated below: r., UNIT MASONRY t p 04200 - 5 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 a. Class 1 (0.40 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface). b. Application: Use for masonry not exposed to exterior or earth. 2. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after prefabrication into units. a. Application: Use for masonry exposed to exterior and in contact with earth. B. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 101, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148311 diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.1483" diameter. 4. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. (At vertically reinforced walls) . b. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. (At walls without vertical reinforcement). C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 6. National Wire Products Corp. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES: A. Weepholes: Provide the following for weepholes: UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 r _ 1. Cotton Cord: Sash cord of length required to product 2" exposure on exterior and 18" in cavity between wythes. 2.5 MASONRY CLEANERS: A. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product which may be used to clean unit masonry surfaces includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. "Sure Klean" No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES: 8 , A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air- entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti -freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use coloring pigments only if required to match existing mortar. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time: and water content. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth. 2. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and above grade applications. D. Colored Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment -to -cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 r Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 2.7 GROUT MIXES: A. Concrete grout fill for bond beams, lintels, pilasters, door jamb cells, anchorage devices and other cores to be filled in concrete masonry units as follows: 1. 2500 psi 28 day compressive strength concrete with pea gravel aggregate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. C. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls, floors and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single- wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the - masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. D. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work _ of other trades. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the -- opening. F. Cut masonry units using motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. G. Matching Existing Masonry Work: Match color and texture of new masonry work with existing work. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES: A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 k Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 rcolumns, walls and arrises do not exceed 1/4" in 101, or 3/8" ` in a story height not to exceed 201, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and r other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 4 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 101, 1/2" r' maximum. B. variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 201 maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. C. variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. D. variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and E E thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2". E. variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/811. r 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS: A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less that nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length in each UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 9 F Copyright 1985, AIA , MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As, the work progresses, build -in items specified under this. and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built- - in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where built-in items and anchor bolts are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal _ lath in the joint below and rod grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: A. Lay solid brick size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete.masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. F. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 10 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 j } 1. Wedge non -bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 3.5 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT: A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6". B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. D. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. E. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows: 1. For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcement acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcement as required by code but not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 2. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. F. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2' -0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints. 1. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above. 3.6 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING: A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11 F Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/85 adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for _ application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent non -masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. 4. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below. a. Acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of cleaner manufacturer. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 12 F� t k Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8/88 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles and pipe which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever.taking field measurements befor fabrication might delay work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous -metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to gratest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Miscellaneous Metal: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specification, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 B. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit 5 copies of shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal _ assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous _ metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, rooler marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501. D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. G. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, complying with FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. H. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: -1. Use material of size and thickness shown,or if not show, METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 r a fr l Copyright 1986, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/88 h . of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. 2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 3. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use - exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. 5. Provide for anchorage of type shoen, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. 6. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. B. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove scal, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-7 "Brush - Off Blast Cleaning". 3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. 5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS: METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC A. Carpenter's Iron Work: 2. 8/88 Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports for overhead door opening, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not show, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise show, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum -joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. C. Stair Handrails and Guardrails: Furnish and install 1 1/2" I.D. standard steel pipe handrails as detailed on the drawings. All welds shall be ground smooth. Railings supported from walls shall be fastened to brackets equal to Julius Blum No. 3382 wall brackets, and wall flanges and floor flanges. D. Exterior Stair Nosings: Furnish and install at all exterior locations and where noted on the drawings cast iron nosings with abrasive surface equal to Wooster Type 101, ferrogrit, with concealed integral anchors spaced approximately 10" on center. Nosings shall extend full length of step with 3" clearance at each end, unless otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templated, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 Copyright 1988, AIA _MASTERSPEC 8/88 PM C B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal l items to in -place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minumum dry r- film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05500 �. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 I (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) .: Copyright 1986, AIA A/S/C MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/86 r SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for: 1. Framing with dimensioned lumber. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Architectural Woodwork is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. -1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design - values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. B. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material. 1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating , plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with rr ROUGH CARPENTRY i E; 06100 - 1 r k Copyright 1986, AIA A/S/C MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/86 applicable standards. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary. coverings including polyethylene and - similar materials. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between each course to provide air circulation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL: A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 — "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades and species — include the following: 1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). — 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber apply grade stamps to ends or back of ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 F r l 7 f- Copyright 1986, AIA A/S/C MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/86 each piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and issue certificate of grade compliance from inspection agency in lieu of grade stamp. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, parapet caps, bucks, nailers, blocking, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. D. All blocking in metal stud walls shall be fire - retardant treated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Fasteners. and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish- as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, �^ provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc { coating (ASTM A 153). t; 2.4 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 t r� Copyright 1986, AIA A/S/C MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/86 A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and - waterproofing. 2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying; and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate -by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 — Copyright 1986, AIA A/S/C MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/86 y J, 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS: A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. . B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 06100 7 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 r (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) 7 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 F SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior miscellaneous trim and mouldings. 2. Wood cabinets (casework). 3. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) wall panels. 4. Wood paneling to match existing. 5. Interior miscellaneous items. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. r- C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. D. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units r^ or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, �„ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminate. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Arrange for production by a single firm of architectural woodwork. C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. D. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise - indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum - temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2 89 B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final ! t shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. . 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements. Coordinate other construction to - ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure decorative laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Formica Corp. 2. Nevamar Corp. 3. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the: referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 6. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below: a. Particleboard: NPA 8. b. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9. c. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. B. FRP Wall Panelling: Shall be 4' x 8' x 3/32", equal to F INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 F Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 Marlite Brand Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester panels with harmonizing moldings. Marlite brand adhesive and sealant as supplied by the Commercial Division, Masonite Corporation, Dover, Ohio. Furnish all molding and trim as required. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for.moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard, unless noted otherwise. 2.5 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: AWI; Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets." B. Grade: Custom. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 I I 0 I Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 C. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any close -grained hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard, unless noted otherwise. D. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium density fiberboard. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Match materials indicated for exposed surfaces. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Grade: Custom E. Lumber Species: Oak. 2.7 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets." B. Grade: Custom C. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Oak. D. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium density fiberboard. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Match materials indicted for exposed surfaces. 2.9 WALL PANELLING A. Match existing panelling. 2.11 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. _ C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop - fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for _ type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. _ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 r Copyright 1989, AIA 14ASTERSPEC 2/89 I F D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Miscellaneous Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips and by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated. H. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 r Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 3.5 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE Item Description Acceptable Location Manuf. or equal European Concealed Self- Grass America, Inc. Casework Style Closing Adjustable #1200 w/#1000 B.P. _ Doors typical or equal Casework Extruded Aluminum Quality #813, 4" Casework Doors Pulls centers, 1 1/8" and Drawers projection Casework Keyed Cylinder K & V No. 987 Locks w/ or w/out cam As indicated Finish: US15 on drawings Keying: Key alike END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/85 F SECTION 07175 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of surfaces to receive water repellent is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Application: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in application of water repellents of types required on substrates similar to those of this project. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for water repellents. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. B. Samples: Submit 16" square samples of each substrate indicated to receive liquid water repellent, with repellent treatment as specified applied to half of each sample. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with written recommendation of manufacturer), when ambient temperature is less than 50 deg.F (10 deg.C); when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months; when rain or temperatures below 40 deg.F (4 deg.C), are predicted for a period of 24 hours, or earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet; when substrate is frozen; at surface temperature of less than 40 deg.F (4 deg.C). F WATER REPELLENTS 07175 - 1 F Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/85 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLVENT -BASED SILICONE SEALER: A. Provide a 3.0% concentration of -polymerized silicone resins in solvent, as recommended by manufacturer for specific substrates of project. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the ^ following: C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Applied Polymers 2. Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Co. 3. Euclid Chemical Co. 4. Nox-Chem Co. 5. Pecora International Corp. 6. Protex Industries, Inc. 7. Rexnord Chemical Products; Sonneborn Building Products S. Thoro System Products 9. W.R. Meadows PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Test Application:, Prior to performance of water repellent work, including bulk purchase/delivery of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner acceptable to Architect, for purpose of demonstrating final effect (visual and physical/chemical) of planned installation. Proceed with work only after Architect's acceptance of test _ application, or as otherwise directed. 1. Revision of planned installation, if any and as requested by Architect, will be by change order where it constitutes - a departure from requirements of contract documents at time of contracting. B. Clean substrate of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellent manufacturer's _ instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. WATER REPELLENTS 07175 - 2 1. Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 8/85 C. Coordination with Sealants: Where feasible, delay application of water repellents until installation of sealants has been t completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with l repellent. D. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Apply a heavy saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure unless otherwise indicated. B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if printed recommendations are not applicable to project conditions. END OF SECTION 07175 I 7 WATER REPELLENTS t 07175 3 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) t Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC { a SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 8/89 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal wall flashing. B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 527 for lock -forming, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for painting; 24 gage except as otherwise indicated. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 2 F I Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below. a. Perimeter joints between wall materials and frames of doors and windows. B. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic-surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. e. Other joints as indicated. C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division-8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES: A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 r I Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 1.4 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product _ required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 _ inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers. D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of completed _ projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. G. Product test reports for each type of joint sealers indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. H. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory - submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying progress of the Work. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. t B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of t joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering �.. with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 A. Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. One -Part Polysulfide Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 12- 1/2; Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One -Part Polysulfide Sealant: a. "Chem -Calk 100"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. 11GC-9 Synthacalk"; Pecora Corp. c. "PRC Rubber Calk 7000"; Product Research & Chemical Corp. 2.3 JOINT SEALANTS FOR HORIZONTAL TRAFFIC SURFACES: A. One part, low modules, neutral cure silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920 for Type S, Grade P, Class 25 for Use T. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING: JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 i 16 Copyright 1987, AIA - `-MASTERSPEC 8/87 A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved i for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants only. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately r JOINT SEALERS l 07900 - 5 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or. blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or, other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by,joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with, joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS: A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of -- installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 i Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/87 r b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths L which allow optimum sealant movement capability. r i, F r 3.4 CLEANING: A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION: A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 7 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 FSECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division -a. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and ' installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 F Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non - vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 2.2 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames, (General): a. Allied Steel. Products, Inc. b. Anweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co. c. Ceco Corp. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Mfg., Inc. f. Dittco Products, Inc g. Fenestra Corp. h. Kewanee Corp. i. Mesker Industries, Inc. j. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc. k. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. 1. Trussbilt, Inc. m. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. MATERIALS: A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 7 r i steel, pickled and oiled, -complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: 1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive -enamel or paint, either air - drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory - assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows: 1. Interior Doors: SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, minimum 18-gage faces. 2. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 16-gage faces. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel. C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot - rolled steel (at fabricator's option). D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 F Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 E. Exposed Fasteners:, Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: 1. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U factor of 0.24 Btu/ (hr x ft sq x degrees F) or better. 2. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. a. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. 3. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 4. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. G. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 4. Apply finish coat to doors.indicated as prefinished by electrostatically spraying and baking, to produce a paint thickness of 1.25 mils. 2.4 STANDARD STEEL DOORS: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 I l Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 _ ;..tk.' r A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules. 2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold -rolled furniture steel. i` 1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction l for exterior applications and knocked -down for field assembly at interior applications. 2. Form exterior frames of hot -dip galvanized steel. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstri ed frames drill stops P PP s P r to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 7 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install standard sheet doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 p� t Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws _ and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In wood stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. C. Door Installation: 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within -- clearances specified in SDI-100. 2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. — 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove.protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. — END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 — 4. Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. B. C. 1.3 Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, € trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing E specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. C. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0" square or as indicated, for the following: I 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA). 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. B. NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series. 1. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. _ C. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S- 3 "Moisture Content". FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 -' Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 r r I F F 1.7 WARRANTY: A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction irk face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 3. Solid Core Interior Doors: a. Life of installation. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. c. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries, Inc. d. Chappell Door Company. e. Doors, Incorporated. f. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. g. Gay Doors, Inc. h. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. i. Graham Manufacturing Corp. J. Ipik Door Co., Inc. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 k. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 1. Weyerhauser Company. 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Red oak, plain sliced, unless noted otherwise. 2. AWI Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Particleboard core, 5- or 7- Ply) • 2.3 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements (Contractor's Option): 1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. 2. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material — and profile indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 F Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. l C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform l clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted 7 with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads;-1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Field -Finished_ Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division-9 section "Painting". 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) FCopyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 F r r SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the proj ect's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. I. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product 'data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by Finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 2 r Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packaged in same container. C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. E. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE: A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type: of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: One or more manufacturers are listed for each hardware type required. The manufacturer's name is used in the Hardware Schedule for purposes of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated, or, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers which comply with requirements including those specified elsewhere in this section. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:. A. General: ,.. 1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf . Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 3 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. a. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. 3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to - published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard _ units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.3 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS: A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed "- entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template- produced units. B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat -head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat -head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Exterior Doors: Non -removable pins. 3. Interior Doors: Non -rising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital top (HT) indicated. FINISH HARDWARE - 08710 - 4 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 F 5. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING: A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. C. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders. D. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 1. Permanently inscribe each key with number or lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer key symbol, and notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE". E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1. Deliver keys to Owner's representative. 2.5 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES: A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. 2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as .otherwise indicated. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5 r Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 B. Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. 2.6 DOOR TRIM UNITS: A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail drops and similar units); either machine screws or self -tapping screw. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel, not more than 1/21, nor less than 1/16" smaller in length than door dimension. C. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 1- 1/2" less than door width on stop side and not more than 1/2" less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated. 2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non -corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2.8 THRESHOLDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. 2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES: A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 6 7 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 7 7 to the manufacturer's standard finish for set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock texture. the latch and lock sets) for color and B. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Mount Hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 7 Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW-1 DOOR 1 EACH TO HAVE: 4 PR BUTTS 1 EXIT DEVICE 1 EXIT DEVICE 1 CYLINDER 2 CLOSERS 2 KICKPLATES. 1 THRESHOLD 1 W/STRIPPING 2 DOOR BOTTOMS 2 ASTRAGALS 1 STOP 1 KICKSTOP HW-2 DOOR TYPE 2 EACH TO HAVE: 1-1/2 PR 1 1 1 1 3 TA2714 USP 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 MCKINNEY 8713 ETL US10 L.C. SARGENT 8710 ETL DT US10 SARGENT 1E72 US10 BEST EAB350-P9 SARGENT 10" X 34" US10 TRIMCO 170A 72" PEMKO - 45A-062 6070 PEMKO 18A-125 36" PEMKO 18A-062 96" PEMKO 1233 _ TRIMCO 1154 GLYNN JOHNSON BUTTS TA2714 USP 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 MCKINNEY PUSHPLATE 1001-3 US10 TRIMCO PULLPLATE 1059-3 US10 TRIMCO CLOSER EAB1230-0 SARGENT STOP W1276CCS US10 TRIMCO SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW-3 DOOR TYPE 3 (CENTER DOOR) EACH TO HAVE: 1 EXIT DEVICE 8813 ETL US10 L.C. 1 CYLINDER 1E72 US10 2 DUMMY CYLINDERS 4142 US10 1 CLOSER EAB350-P9 1 THRESHOLD 170A 36" 1 W/STRIPPING 45A-062 3080 1 DOOR BOTTOM 1SA-125 36" RE -USE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE SARGENT BEST LORI SARGENT PEMKO PEMKO PEMKO FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 8 t• Copyright 1984, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic 5/84 RW-4 DOOR TYPE 3 6 4 EACH TO HAVE: 1 DUMMY EXIT DEVICE 8893 ETL DT US10 SARGENT 1 CLOSER EAB350-P9 SARGENT 1 THRESHOLD 170A 36" PEMKO 1 W/STRIPPING 45A-062 3080 PEMKO 1 DOOR BOTTOM 18A-125 36" PEMKO RE -USE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE HW-5 DOOR TYPE 5 EACH TO HAVE: 1 THRESHOLD 170A 36" PEMKO 1 W/STRIPPING 45A-062 3070 PEMKO 1 DOOR BOTTOM 18A-125 36" PEMKO 1 SIGN MS-100-3 MASTERS RE -USE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE HW-6 DOOR TYPE 6 EACH TO HAVE: 1 THRESHOLD 170A 3611 PEMKO 1 W/STRIPPING 45A-062 3070 PEMKO 1 DOOR BOTTOM 18A-125 3611 PEMKO RE -USE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE HW-7 DOOR TYPE 7 EACH TO HAVE: 2 CLOSERS EAB350-P9 SARGENT 1 STOP W1276CCS US10 TRIMCO 1 STOP 1244M US10 TRIMCO 1 KICK STOP 1154 GLYNN JOHNSON RE -USE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE HW-8 SWINGING GATE - CONCESSION 1 SET PIVOT HINGE 4007 MCKINNEY END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 9 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. c. Mid -State Tile Co. d. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. United States Ceramic Tile Co. TILE 109300 - 2 2/89 -3. Organic Adhesives, Type I: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. �• d. Custom Building Products e C-Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. r' k. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 4. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland Cement Grouts: i a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C-Cure Chemical Co f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. r- g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. t i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. r' 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements c, unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products TILE -09300 - 3 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Match Architect's sample. 2. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics. 3. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 4. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 2 inches by 2 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Face:, Match existing. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. TILE I ` 09300 - 4 2/89 A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. b. Dry Grout Mixture: An on -the -job -mixture of white portland cement ,that -complies with latex additive manufacturer's requirements. 1) Application: Use commercial portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory TILE 09300 - 5 7, Copyright 1989, AIA _MASTERSPEC 2/89 conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Match existing. F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. TILE .109300 - 6 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that the is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper r- or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for'at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09300 r TILE 09300 - 7 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 t SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed in existing exposed suspension systems. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Air Outlets and Inlets" for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. 2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting Fixtures" for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project. B. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire - performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations t acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. t. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 F Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any) — 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish ten full-size units of each type installed. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 lY Copyright 1989 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 t PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Toilet Room ceilings. 1. Armstrong #602A Ceramaguard Perforated, white, 2x4, square edge, 5/8" thick. 2. USG #56645 Ceramic Heritage, white, 2x4, square edge, 5/8" thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half -width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Notify Architect when lay -out of reflected ceiling plan cannot be obtained as indicated before proceeding with work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.5 EXISTING CEILINGS A. Coordinate installation of Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical work located above existing suspended acoustical ceiling systems. Remove ceiling systems as required, minimizing extent of existing ceiling to be disturbed. B. At completion of work by other trades, replace ceiling system and thermal insulation (if any). C. Soiled, smudged, finger -printed, chipped edges or broken ceiling panels scratched and bent suspension system members will be grounds for rejection. Replace damaged components to match existing. D. If questionable areas of ceiling exist, notify Architect before commencing any work. Document by photographs, in the presence of the Architect, all areas that may be of consequence at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1 09511 - 4 — Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 rSECTION 09680, - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent, location and details ofeachtype of carpeting are indicated on drawings, carpet data sheets and in schedules. B. Work of this section includes furnishing and installation of carpeting, carpet cushion, adhesives and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. Commercial Carpet: Carpet intended for use in commercial and public spaces, with construction, fire ratings, static control and appearance appropriate for this use. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data:- Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of carpeting material and installation accessory required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 1. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. 18" square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12" long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 3. 6" square samples of each type of carpet cushion. C. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work. F CARPETING 09680 - 1 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with — not less than 3 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet installation with not less than 2 years of experience in installation of carpeting similar to that required for this — project. 1.6 TESTING: A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for the following: -' 1.Fire performance characteristics. 2. Physical properties indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide carpeting that is identical to that tested for the following fire performance _ requirements, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flammability: As follows: a. Test Method: ASTM D 2859. — 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows: a. Test Method: ASTM E 84. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: As follows: a. Test Method: ASTM E 648. C. Physical Properties: Provide carpeting that is identical to ^ that tested for the following physical properties, according to the test method indicated. 1. Sound Absorption Characteristics: As follows: a. Test Method: ASTM C 423." — Z. Fade Resistance: As follows: a. Test Method: AATCC 16E. CARPETING 09680 - 2 7 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 I D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. Include supporting certified laboratory testing data indicating that material meets specified test requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Sequence carpet installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY: A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpeting which fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 2 years after the date of substantial completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. CARPETING 09680 - 3 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 B. Replacement Materials: After, completion of work, deliver not less than 2% of each type, color, and pattern of carpeting, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. General: Detailed carpet construction as follows: Yarn Construction 100$ Antron Continuous Filament Nylon. Weave Woven Interlock. Pitch 165 P.O.B. Max. Electrostatic Charge : 70/20 AATCC-134 Under 3.0 KV. Pile Height : .230 Inches. Ply : 4. Stitches or Rows per Inch : 9.0. Primary Backing : Synthetic. Woven Yarn Weight 30 oz. per sq. yd. Roll Width : 12 feet. Color and Design : As selected by Architect. Backing Material Guarantee 10 Yr Full Wear: 5 Yr Lt.d Performance. B. Equal to Mohawk, Supertron. 2.2 ACCESSORIES: A. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-metallic: Extruded or molded heavy- duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated; minimum 2" wide anchorage flange; colors selected by Architect from standard colors. B. Installation Adhesive Water-resistant, non -staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer, which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. C. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and preventing pile loss at seams. D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, cushions, and. other carpeting products; selected by CARPETING 09680 - 4 - i Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 r h Installer to meet project circumstances and requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed. Notify contractor in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough areas using material recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer. E B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from r surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no dusting through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. Follow seaming diagram as submitted and approved. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorway. B. Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting; provide for movement. F. Glue -Down Installation: 7 CARPETING 09680 - 5 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. 2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove any adhesive promptly from face of carpet by method which will not damage carpet face. 3.4 CLEANING: A. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors. 3.5 -PROTECTION: A. Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. B. Restretching: Return to installation after approximately 6 — months of occupancy and use; restretch carpet in each space, repair faults in seaming, trim and adjust carpeting at edges. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPETING 1109680 - 6 - Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of new and existing exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Pre finished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components: a. Acoustic materials. b. Finished mechanical.and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. PAINTING 09900 - 1 i"' Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. _ f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to .be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, ^ Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. _ 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's 'technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. _ "PAINTING 09900 - 2 _ Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 r' • 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not ,displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials, except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING E A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder. E type) . E 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. PAINTING 09900 - 3 7 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. _ 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F ( 3 2 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within -' temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: PAINTING 09900 - 4 L Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 r1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). r 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). r 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). E 2.2 PRIMERS A. Synthetic, Rust -Inhibiting Primer: Quick -drying, rust - L inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior under full -gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint r #163. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 5. P & L: Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer. 6. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. F B. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 2. Glidden: 3. Moore: 4. Pittsburgh: 5. S-W: 2.3 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 5229 Glid-Guard All -Purpose Metal Primer. Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer. Galvite B50W3. A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on concrete or masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. PAINTING 09900 - 5 F Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 B. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc -coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full -gloss alkyd enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. ExteriorAcrylic Emulsion: Quick -drying, flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over concrete, stucco, masonry (including concrete masonry block), and mineral -fiber - reinforced cement -panel surfaces: 1. Devoe: 15XX Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex 2. Glidden: 3. Moore: 4. Pittsburgh: 5. P & L: 6. S-W: Flat House Paint. 3525 Spred Glide -On. Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105. 72 Line Sun -Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. _ A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. B. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3. Moore: Impervo'High-Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. C. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed, zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and aluminum: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. PAINTING 09900 - 6 F Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Metalastic II Enamel B-53 Series. 2.5 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL 11/88 A. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low -odor, semigloss, alkyd enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete, masonry (including concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall: 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 4. Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 5. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. E E 6. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. B. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD FINISHING MATERIALS A. Oil -Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow -penetrating oil -type wood stain for general use on interior wood surfaces under varnishes or wax finishes: 1. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. 2. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. 3. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain. 4. Pittsburgh: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 5. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain. 6. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. B. Cut Shellac: Quick -drying, rosin -free, clear, general- purpose shellac varnish for use on the interior over stained F PAINTING 09900 - 7 F Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 And natural -finished woodwork for a clear finish: 1. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3. Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick - Dry Sanding Sealer. 4. Pittsburgh: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5. S-W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. C. Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil -type rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or natural -finished woodwork: 1. Devoe: 2. Glidden: 3. Moore: 4. Pittsburgh: 5. P & L: 6. S-W: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. Benwood SAtin Finish Varnish #404. -' 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 38 Clear Finish Gloss. Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory _ conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION OF NEW AND EXISTING SURFACES A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, _ plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the _ items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. .Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other PAINTING 09900 - 8 — Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 f contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted ^' in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each k particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted. in manufacturer's printed directions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. d. At existing surfaces, repair surface defects, damage and cracks before applying paint. Dull glossy areas with sandpaper or surface conditioner to facilitate adhesion. Feather and smooth chipped and abraided areas by sanding. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. PAINTING a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. ZEE r. Copyright 1988, AIA 1MASTERSPEC 11/88 b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, - loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. _ Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of - uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. - 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate PAINTING 109900 - 10 L. Copyright 1988, AIA .MASTERSPEC - 11/88 identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers r, used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply r' succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even r. smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind `- permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar F PAINTING 09900 - 11 w t Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. 'E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. _ 4. Ductwork. — 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors: and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. G. Electrical items tobe painted include but are not limited to: _ 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to _ material thatisrequired to be painted or finished and has PAINTING 09900 - 12 Copyright 1988, AIA 14ASTERSPEC 11/88 f not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. , Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush l marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections r will not be acceptable. i 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. F3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. l B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. C Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F FPAINTING 09900 - 13 Copyright 1988, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/88 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry _ units) - 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less that 2.5 mils. a. First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19). b.: Second Coat: Exterior ACrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19). — 2. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Latex Finish: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. First Coat: Exterior Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsion (FS TT-P-55, Type II). b. Second Coat: Exterior Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsion (FS TT-P-55, Type II). 3.7 C. D. A. B. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over existing. a. _First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). b. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641). b. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). c. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Stained Woodwork: 1. Stained Varnish Rubbed Finish: 3 finish coats over stain. a. Satin Coat: Oil -Type Interior Wood Stain (FS TT-S- 711) . b. First Coat: Cut Shellac (FS TT-S-300). PAINTING 09900 - 14 F F Copyright 1988,AIA MASTERSPEC 11 88 c. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). d. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust -Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P- 664). b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). c. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). d. At existing finishes, primer and undercoat may be omitted unless unfinished surface is exposed, then spot prime and undercoat bare areas. Apply finish coat as required to provide complete and uniform coverage. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE AND PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS - ON EXISTING SURFACES A. General: Prepare the existing substrates and provide the following paint systems for the various conditions as indicated. B. Existing Plaster Surfaces 1. Fill open cracks, voids and damaged surfaces, restore finish texture. 2. Clean surface. 3. 2 coats latex semi -gloss alkyd enamel. C. Existing Gypsum Drywall Surfaces. 1. Repair open joints by cutting our, tape and bedding and restore texture to match existing. 2. Clean surfaces. 3. 2 coats latex semigloss alykd enamel. D. Existing Door Frames, Window Frames and Exposed Steel Framing. 1. Sand lightly. 2. Clean surfaces. 3. 2 coats oil base semi -gloss enamel. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 15 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS l PART 1 - GENERAL t. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.' This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet I compartments. rB. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Metal, baked enamel finish. C. Styles of toilet compartments include: 1. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced. D. Styles of screens include: 1. Floor -anchored. 2. Ceiling -hung. 3. Floor -to -ceiling post. 4. Wall -hung. E. Supports for attaching compartments to overhead structural system are specified in a Division 5 Section. F. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, k and purse shelves, are specified in another Division 10 Section. t. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, r and accessories. C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 anchorage devices built into other work. D. Samples of full range of colors for each type of unit required. Submit 6-inch-square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Baked Enamel Finish: a. Accurate Partition Corp. b. All American Metal Corp. c. American Sanitary Partition Corp. d. Ampco Products, Inc. e. Flush -Metal Partition Corp. f. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp. g. Global Steel Products Corp. h. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. i. Lambaton-Universal Metal Products. J. Metpar Steel Products Corp. k. The Mills Company. 1. Monarch Toilet Partitions, Inc. m. Sanymetal Products Co. n. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc. TOILET_COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 r Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 2.2 MATERIALS t A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for r surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which ! exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other r imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. G. B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTDI A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, of following minimum thicknesses: 7 1. Pilasters (overhead -braced): 0.0396 inch (20 gage). 2. Pilasters (unbraced): 0.0516 inch (18 gage). 3. Panels and Screens: 0.0396 inch (20 gage). 4. Doors: 0.0336 inch (22 gage). r C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 0.108 inch (12 1 gage), galvanized steel sheet. D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 0.0785 inch (14 gage), galvanized steel sheet. E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1 inch minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches minimum for pilasters. ` F. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high, 0.0396 inch thick (20 gage), finished to match hardware. E _ i G. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized aluminum. H. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium -plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). I. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum, antigrip profile, with clear anodized finish. ! J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed ` fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type rheads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION 7 il TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 7 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/ 91 A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24-inch-wide in -swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32-inch-wide (clear opening) out -swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped. C. Metal Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and seal edges with continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld edges and corners with exposed welds ground smooth. D. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. E. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring -action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out -swinging doors. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors. 2.4 FINISH A. Color: One of manufacturer's standard colors in each room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 l Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 F F F PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 5 r E, No Text SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of specialty signs required include the following: 1. Raised copy panel signs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, sign wording and lettering layout. Show anchorages and accessory items. B. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacturer and design of each sign component including graphics. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers: F SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 1 Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC - Basic a. Allen Marking Products b. Andco Industries Corp. c. APCO Graphics, Inc d. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. e. Best Manufacturing. f. The Supersine Company. g. Vomar Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS: 11/85 A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or — continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790, a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of — 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: 1. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as ._ "opaque," provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards. 2. Material thickness: 1/811. B. Mounting Tape: Double -sided vinyl tape, 1/2" wide x 1/16" thick. 2.3 FABRICATION: A. Raised Copy: Machine -cut copy characters from matte - finish opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. — 1. Panel Material: Matte -finished opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised copy thickness:_ Not less than 1/32 inch. _ 3. Message stock: 2" tall with 1/2" borders at both ends. 4. Letter type: Helvetica Medium. 5. Letter size: 1" high. 2.4 FINISHES: A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that - requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the SPECIALTY SIGNS 1 10440 - 2 - I F r i Copyright 1985, AIA MASTERSPEC Basic manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: 11/85 A. General: Locate sign units and accessories as scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. 2. Mount signs 60" from center line of message to finished floor and 2" from edge of door frame to edge of sign on door operator side. 3. Mount handicapped access symbol adjacent to message sign and center on edge of message sign. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces.in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF SIGNS: A. Room Message Men MEN Women WOMEN B. At Men's Toilet and Women's Toilet, provide 411x4" signs with the international symbol #16, handicapped access. C. Mount signs on wall 54 inches above floor on strike side of door. END OF SECTION 10440 SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 3 No Text FCopyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 I SECTION.10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 1. Paper towel dispenser. 2. Toilet tissue dispenser. 3. Grab bar. 1.3 SUBMITTALS �. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. C. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. single -source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. i 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS t TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 F Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5- year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3.-Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 6. McKinney/Parker B. Scheduled Accessories: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each - type of toilet accessory is indicated after each item. 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: One manufacturer is listed for each toilet accessory required. The Manufacturer's name is used for purposes of establishing minimum requirements.. Provide either the product designated, or the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers which comply with requirements. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22-gage (.034-inch) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 t: C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on r., base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2. D. Mirror. Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, tempered, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective ( organic coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative and obtain receipt. 2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS A. Surfaced -Mounted Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of stainless steel with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset. Provide pierced slots at sides as refill indicator. 1. Capacity: Not less than 400 single -fold paper towels. 2. McKinney/Parker: Model 611. 2.4 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Single -Roll Dispenser: Size to accommodate core tissue to 5- inch-diameter roll. 1. Mounting: Surface mounted, concealed anchorage. 2. Construction: 18 ga. plated steel with polished chrome finish. 3. McKinney/Parker: Model 1032.- F4W� �q 0.1 1A§ =�`:k- A. Stainless Steel, Type 304: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 gage (.050 inch) and as follows: 1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard set screw applied flanges and anchorages. 2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface - and inside face of bar. �- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 r� Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture. 4. Medium -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches. 5. Anchorage: Expansion fasteners. 6. Length: As indicated on the drawings. 7. McKinney/Parker: Model 9603/9688. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theftproof installation, as follows: 1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring special tool to remove. _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 - Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/89 A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 f TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F 7 t SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. INSPECTION: All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found F11 during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. F PROTECTION DURING STORAGE: The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored -in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Flange Bolt, Sets I ASME Pressure Piping Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. �", PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-1 VALVES: General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed body, malleable handle, square stem top; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. Check Valves: Use "Silent" check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring; equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 10B or 20B up to 125 psi 11B, or 21B up to 250 psig. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and 0-rings, "Bubble Tight shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and 0-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-2 f L. Install gauge cocks at pumps ascloseto pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. TEST WELLS• Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS: Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3 Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion .- joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. ESCUTCHEONS CEILING PLATES: Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95% tin, 5% antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as 50/50 or 40/60 will not be permitted. REPAIR OF LEAKS: All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-4 F 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. -Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. ALIGNMENT AND GRADES: General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-5 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL p OTE• 1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Domestic Water Lines (Hot and Cold): Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. PLUMBING FIXTURES: r The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as r directed by the Architect. r PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-1 F The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION NSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. — TESTING: Test all pipes before they are concealed in"furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test at city water pressure. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. END OF SECTION PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-2 C SECTION 15235 - HEATING WATER'SYSTEM3 PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Install heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. P^ PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". Heating Water Lines: Type L hard drawn copper pipe assembled using wrought copper fittings. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Hoffman No. 78 cast brass body (150 psig) on pipe sizes 3" and smaller; Hoffman No. 792 cast iron body (250 psig) on pipe sizes 4" and larger. Crane and Sarco acceptable. Pipe discharge to a floor drain or as directed. Strainer: "Y" pattern Hoffman Model 415 cast iron, screwed, 250 psig, with 20 mesh stainless steel screen on sizes 2" and smaller; Hoffman Model 450 cast iron, flanged, 125 psig with 0.045'perforated stainless steel screen on sizes 2 1/2" and larger. Mueller acceptable. Compression Tank: Welded steel, ASME stamped bladder tank. Size shall be as shown on the drawings. It shall be supported from the structure on adjustable hanger rods. It shall be factory coated for corrosion resistance. HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15235-1 7 Provide and install in the water supply line to each compression tank a gate valve, a Bell and Gossett No. D-525 combination anti -syphon pressure reducing valve and relief valve, and Watts reduced pressure backflow preventer. Shot Feeder Provide and install a two gallon shot feeder across the supply and return mains of the closed water circulating system. The feeder shall be installed with ball valves on either side of the feeder. Provide an air cock, funnel, sill valve and drain valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. CLEANING: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air, heat to operating temperature, and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. TESTING: Before insulating,or concealing ,any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. CHEMICAL TREATMENT: The,Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Architect indicating system condition after initial fill. END OF SECTION HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15235-2 CSECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 0TE * Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and rSupplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, C apply to work of this section. r' SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and I I equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, rCarpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 *' Pipe Rest, All 295 or 291 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 t Adjuster All 2381 HANGER RODS: 1. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel pipe or Copper Tube Supported r 3/81- 2-1/2" and smaller 1/211 3" and 4" 5/8-' S" through 81- 3/4" 10" and larger HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-1 6. HANGER SPACING: All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced. Where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a'minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10,0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2 1. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation on horizontal lines shall -be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom half of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type fully encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/41' wide lacquered steel band at each end. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3 r (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) t, SECTION 15400 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. F SCOPE: This section ofthe specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame: spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS: Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: INSULATION 15400-1 F 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white draft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. Where specified, insulate fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and 'using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall,be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. APPLICATION OF INSULATION: Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket,.lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams with a double tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system. If a single tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system is used, an additional layer of Benjamin Foster 82-07 vapor barrier lap adhesive must be used. Tightly butt the ends of the pipe covering and apply the-4" wide butt strips as provided by the insulation manufacturer. INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS: The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines Insulate with molded _ sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1" thick. Insulate fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. INSULATION 15400-2 r r Domestic Cold Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Vapor seal all insulation. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15400-3 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT t PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. SCOPE: This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the tctal number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. r �. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity EQUIPMENT 15500-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS MOTORS: Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the.following.requirements: Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C .— ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as.required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. STARTERS: Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS: Pumps shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Each shall be of the type, rotational speed, and have the flow rate and characteristics listed. The name and model number listed for each pump establishes a standard which the pump furnished must equal to exceed. Acceptable makers of scheduled pumps are Allis-Chalmeres, Bell and Gossett, Weinman, Peerless, Aurora and Paco. Pumps casings and glands shall be suitable for operation under 150 psig static heads. Rotational speeds shall not exceed those scheduled. Under no —' circumstances shall a pump be offered with an impeller radius greater than 90% of the distance from the shaft centerline to the cutoff in the casing, except in the case of in -line circulators. EQUIPMENT 15500-2 The head capacities are listed for bidding purposes only. The Contractor shall carefully calculate the head of each pump, taking into consideration the pressure drops in all equipment, exact lengths of pipe, valves, fittings, etc. These calculations shall take into account actual routing of the piping and all other factors that would determine the actual pumping head of each system, and shall form the basis of final pump selection. Motors shall be constant speed, drip proof motors, and shall be so sized with relation to the pump impeller that the required brake horsepower will not exceed the rated motor horsepower at any point on the pump curve. Copies of manufacturer's performance curve shall be submitted as shop drawings on each pump. Each curve shall be clearly marked to indicate the diameter ofthe impeller and the selection point. All pump motors shall have 1.15 service factor. All pumps shall have gauge tappings. All pumps shall be factory enameled. Close Coupled Pumps: Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing and bronze impeller. The shaft shall be carbon steel with renewable bronze wear rings. Ball bearings shall be 100,000 hour average life and grease lubricated. Provide with mechanical seals. Motor shall be NEMA c-face standard per Hydraulic Institute. END OF SECTION r EQUIPMENT 15500-3 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 15600 - TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ra. PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SCOPE: This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after heating season begins to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. r Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 2. Flow rate, inlet pressure, outlet pressure and motor current readings at each pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. INSTRUCTIONS: During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the'operation and maintenance of all equipment. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. FEND OF SECTION r-TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-1 f (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F. r", SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS x i PART 1 GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: The work shall include furnishing and installing all flexible metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONDUITS: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. CONDUIT FITTINGS: Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. OUTLET BOXES: UL listed of sizes and types specified. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 1 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Types: Above grade interior conduits shall be electrical metallic tubing in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, such as accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where 6' above the floor. EMT shall not be used outside, in concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in masonry walls, in locations likely to be damp, or exposed within 6' of the floor. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. Around Heat Producing Equipment Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 2 t; t Protection of Raceways: raceways Seal 'ends of all s with blank discs y ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/$" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. I RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 3 r P For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover,plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. Identification of Pull and Junction Boxes: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. Boxes serving other systems shall be indicated by name. Installation of Surface Raceways: Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner. The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint raceway to match surface of installation. END OF SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 4 F SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, including pulling devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): @r— Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, f continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. r. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW or MIN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. JOINTS AND SPLICES: ( Stranded Copper Conductors UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression r- connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split=bolt connectors are not acceptable. L CONDUCTORS 16120 - 1 Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. COLOR CODING: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION WIRE PULLING: Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. CONDUCTORS 16120 - 2 I INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): Branch Circuits: Not more than one power.or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and -except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc, Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. END OF SECTION 16120 F CONDUCTORS 16120 - 3 r . { (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) F SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. WALL SWITCHES: For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO a. Single pole wall switch 1201 b. Three-way wall switch 1203 c. Four-way wall switch 1204 d. Pilot -lighted switch 1201-PLC e. Momentary Contact switch 1556 For loads exceeding above listing: r, DEVICE a. Single pole wall switch b. Three-way wall switch c. Four-way wall switch d. Pilot -lighted switch HUBBELL CATALOG NO. 1221 1223 1224 1221-PLC C" WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 Pp 1 Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel except in unfinished or machinery spaces, where plates shall be Sierra "P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is _ finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. MOUNTING HEIGHTS: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4#6" END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS: Submit for review manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exteror lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. SUBSTITUTIONS: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review of the: engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture. Approval for lighting fixture substitution shall not be given prior to the bid opening. COPE: This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or r., schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. I LIGHTING 16500 - 1 Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts installed in an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be General Electric "Watt -Miser", Advance Mark III or Universal SLH, or equivalent energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Fluorescent Lamps: Reduced wattage type General Electric Watt -Miser Cool White. PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, -square with the general construction and securely attached. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500 - 2 r SECTION 16770 - SOUND SYSTEM i. PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall furnish descriptive material and full engineering data on the equipment he proposes to furnish. Approval shall be obtained before final purchase is made. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment, i if necessary, to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on drawings. QUALIFICATIONS: The manufacturer or his agent shall maintain an experienced organization, fully equipped and staffed to maintain the equipment in operating order. He shall be prepared to offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system after the guarantee period. GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, except tubes, fuses and pilot lights, to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of 360 days from date of acceptance. SCOPE: Furnish and install as specified hereinbefore and as shown in the plans, the following specialized electronic systems: A centralized sound and intercommunication system with loudspeakers, microphones and wiring as required. It is the intent of this specification to obtain complete operating systems and all materials to provide such systems shall be furnished whether or not enumerated or shown on the plans. All equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories. All work must be one in accordance with applicable electrical codes, under the direction of a qualified and approved factory distributor, to the approval of Owner and Architect. He shall also train the Owner's personnel in the operation of the equipment. SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 1 F PART 2 - PRODUCTS SCHOOL PA SYSTEM: The Master Control shall be a Rauland Desk -Top Director II Series DIR350 or approved equal Control Center, engineered for optimum simplicity of operation, made possible by the use of function -identified pushbuttons and supported by step-by-step instructions printed on the control panels. The Master Control shall provide at least the following features and functions: Direct 2-way voice communications between the Control Center and any room or any other speaker -equipped location, with simultaneous distribution of program material to any other room or location. Distribution of voice announcements from the Control Center to any or all speakers. Selective distribution of program material to any or all rooms. Ability to transmit a program or announcement simultaneously to all rooms and locations by the simple operation of a single All -Call pushbutton switch. Separate units for two (low) impedance microphones and two high impedance auxiliary program sources (tuner, cassette -player). Program selection shall be easily accomplished by simply pressing the appropriately labeled pushbutton. Aural (monitor speaker)..and visual (LED) monitoring of all program material. Selective distribution of all program material up to 25 rooms, with provision for further expansion. Provisions for the instantaneous distribution from the Control Center of emergency messages to all locations equipped with loudspeakers, simply by pressing a single red pushbutton. This action shall bypass all other controls, override all other programs, and transmit the emergency message at a predetermined volume level. Ability to monitor a speaker location without the interruption of a program source. Functionally identified pushbuttons shall be provided for each of the Control Center's functions. SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 2 The Control Center shall meet the following technical requirements: It shall be all -solid-state and designed for continuous, duty service in institutional and industrial applications on line voltages of 105-130 volts 60 Hz AC, over a temperature range of l' 0 degree F. to 130 degree F. Power consumption of rated output shall be no more than 100 watts. The Control Center shall include two separate amplifiers. The program amplifier shall be capable of producing 35 watts RMS at less than 2% distortion. Frequency response shall be with ±3 dB from 50 to 15,000 Hz. Noise level at rated output shall be at least -60 dB on microphone, -70 dB on auxiliary. The intercom amplifier shall have an output rating of 5 watts RMS; frequency response shall be shaped for maximum intelligibility; noise level shall be least -55 dB. Both amplifiers shall have a balanced 25 volt line output, convertible for use with 45 ohm speakers. The Control Center shall also include 25 3-position (Program -Off -Intercom) station selector keys, an All-Call/Emergency pushbutton, and a Talk -Listen pushbutton. The station selector key handles shall be aluminum -sheathed and shall be permanently affixed. Selector switches with plastic push -on knobs, or knobs held in place by friction only, will not be accepted. The All-Call/Emergency switch shall gather all station lines and permit single pushbutton distribution of announcements to all speaker locations. Similarly. the Program All -Call switch shall permit single pushbutton distribution of program material to all speaker locations. The Talk -Listen pushbutton switch shall be of the relay type designed for more than one million service -free operations Control centers employing switches which do not meet this requirement will not be accepted. The Control Center shall be finished in black; the control panel shall be tinted brushed chrome protected by a wear -resistant protective top coating. The above equipment shall be completely factory -assembled, wired and tested by a United States manufacturer of established reputation who,has been regularly engaged in the manufacture of School Sound/Communications Systems for at least 5 years. The system shall be supplied or installed by or under the direct supervision of an authorized local distributor who has been trained by the manufacturer in the proper installation, operation and service of the equipment. AM/FM/CASSETTS: The AM/Fm tuner and cassette record player shall be a Rauland SRX 163 or approved equal, designed for continuous duty service in institutional, commercial and industrial sound and communications systems. w SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 3 F The equipment shall be of advanced solid-state design, to assure reduced power consumption, greater reliability, and longer life expectancy. The AM portion shall have a tuning range of 525 to 1620 KHz, and a sensitivity of at least 15 microvolts for 20dB quieting. The FM section shall have a tuning range of 88 to 108 MHz, with sensitivity of 2.5 microvolts for 30dB quieting. Frequency response shall be plus or minus 3dB, 50 to 10,000 Hz. Front panel controls shall include on-off/volumed switch, a tuning control, and AM/FM selector switch, and tuning balance. Tuning shall be accomplished on an illuminated calibrated slide -rule dial. The cassette tape player section shall play all standard cassettes at a tape speed of 1 7/8" per second. Frequency response shall be plus or minus 3dB 50 to 10,000 Hz, with less than 0.25% wow and flutter. Signal-to-noise ration shall be 50dB or better. When used with a C-60 cassette, rewind time as well as fast forward time shall be approximately 165 seconds. Controls shall include locking Fast -Forward, Rewind and Eject. The Rauland SRX 163 shall be equipped for easy mounting in any standard 19" rack; it shall not occupy more than 3 1/2" 'of vertical space and the face panel shall be finished in tinted brushed chrome. The Contractor shall provide and install antennas as required above the ceiling to achieve good AM and FM radio reception. MICROPHONE: The announcement/paging microphone shall be a Rauland 1295, or equal, omnidirectional pressure -operated dynamic type, offering a frequency response form 50-12,000 Hz, substantially independent of direction to the source of sound. The output level shall be -55dB (odB-1 volt/microbar) in the high impedance (40K ohms) positions and -58dB (0-lmw/10 microbars) in the low impedance (400 ohms) position. The microphone shall offer dual impedance (high or low), selectable by the simple adjustment of a slide switch. The microphoned diaphragm shall be fabricated of Mylar. A durable leaf -spring type push -to -talk switch incorporation additional contracts for remote relay operation shall be provided. Thereshall also be a switch "locking" capability. The microphone base shall be of die-cast zinc alloy, with molded durable Cycolac body, in professional black finish; four non-skid mar -proof molded feet shall be provided. It shall be equipped with a 7 foot long, 4-conductor, two -shield black cable. Size shall not exceed 9 3/8" high, 4 3/4" wide, and 5 7/8" deep; weight, including cable, shall not exceed 2 pounds.. SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 4 CEILING SPEAKERS: The cone type ceiling speakers shall be Rauland Model US0188 or approved equal, furnished and installed as indicated on the plans. The speaker shall be an 8" permanent magnet cone type having a viscous -damped cone and a ceramic (Indox 5) magnet weighing at least 5.4 oz. It shall have a frequency range of at least 30 to 18,000 cycles, a watt program power -handling capacity, and an axial sensitivity of at last 96dB at 4-foot with a 1-watt input. Voice coil shall be 3/4" diameter with an 8-ohm impedance. Flux density shall be at least 10,000 sauss. The speaker shall be equipped with a 25-volt line -matching transformer, Rauland Model T220L or approved equal. The transformer shall provide 1/2, 1 and 2-watt power taps, and d have an insertion loss of less than ldB from 20 to 20,000 cycles. Its frequency response shall be 1 plus or minus dB from 20 to r" 20,000 cycles, and it shall induce neglegible distortion even at full power. The transformer shall measure at least 1 5/8" high, 1 1/4" wide and 2 13/16" long, and shall have a 5/8" stack of 5/8" 26 ga. A.A.S. i steel core. Primary inductance at 60 cycles shall be at least 13.5 hv. Ceiling type loudspeaker baffles shall be aluminum approximately 13-inches in diameter. Finish shall be to match ceiling color. Baffles shall be mounted to steel rough -in cans. {t BAFFLE: r The baffle shall be Soundolier Model 51-8 or approved equal. Baffle shall be constructed of cold rolled steel. The baffle shall have an iron phosphate coating prior to finishing for rust prevention and maximum paint adhesion. The finish shall be a hard baked semi -gloss white enamel. The baffle shall have a diameter of 12 3/411. WALL MOUNTED SPEAKERS: The Speaker shall be a Rauland Model US0216 or approved equal. It shall be a coaxial type incorporating an 8" (20.32 cm) diameter low frequency unit and a 3" (7.62 cm) piezo ceramic high frequency unit. No crossover capacitor shall be required. Frequency response shall be uniform over the range of 40 to 30,000 Hz; ceramic magnet weight shall be at least 20 ounces (283 gr). Axial sensitivity shall be 97dB at 4' with l watt input; power rating shall be 20 watts RMS rating; Voice coil impedance shall be 8 ohms, and shall measure 1" (2.54 CM). The speaker shall be equipped with a universal transformer mounting bracket. r SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 5 The wall baffle shall be a Rauland 4909-8 or approved equal surface -mounting baffle. It shall have a natural blond finish, a -full grille front, and be at least 10-1/2" high, 10-1/2" wide and 6-3/8" deep. It shall have a volume of at least 475 cubic inches and be constructed of metal or plastic, or baffles not having a natural blond finish will not be accepted. Speaker mounting screws and a wall -mounting bracket designed for attachment to either a standard electrical box or to any flat surface shall be furnished with the baffle. MICROPHONE OUTLETS: Furnish and install microphone outlets, Cannon XLR series as indicated on the drawings. MICROPHONES: Furnish one floor standing microphone. The floor microphone shall be cardiod dynamic type. Frequency response shall be 60 to 17,000 Hz, specially shaped above 1000 Hz to maintain presence for vocal and musical pickups an below 100 Hz shall vary inversely with distance. Response at the front of the microphone at 1000 Hz shall be nominally 18dB greater than response at the rear. The microphone shall have an output of -60dB. The microphone shall have an acoustalloy diaphragm with laminated volumetric dome. An internal blast filter shall be provided. Low impedance connections shall be balanced lineconfiguration. The case shall be machined steel. Dimensions shall be 7-1/41' long, 1-7/8 diameter, 3/4" shank diameter, and weight shall be 9.2 ounces. Furnish one floor stand for use with each microphone. Stand shall be two piece telescoping type adjustable form 36" to 62" in height, locked securely in position by a positive hand operated clutch. Furnish two non-adjustable table stands and one baby boom attachment. Furnish two 25-foot microphone extension cords. PART 3 - EXECUTION WIRING: All wiring shall be 100% foil shielded, plastic covered sized as required, such as Belden Beldfoil type 8450. All cables and wiring shall be installed in a system of conduits and boxes. SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 6 A representative of the manufacturer shall make final connection to all equipment and shall test and adjust the system for maximum performance. They shall also allot sufficient time to train the Owner's representative as to proper operation of the system. END OF SECTION 16770 SOUND SYSTEM 16770 - 7 (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SPECIAL CONDITIONS -44- (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) r• a City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 606-767-2167 December 16, 1991 ALL TEXAS BUILDERS BOX 3488 ATTN: TONY RATLIFF LUBBOCK TX 79452 SUBJECT: Mae Simmons Community Center Renovations Office of Purchasing The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and r. opened on the 27th day of November, 1991, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: City of Lubbock Bid # 11671 MAE SIMMONS COMMUNITY CENTER RENOVATIONS as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your r proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the December 12, 1991, at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) ,., days from your receipt of this Notice. '- The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. r CITY OF LUBBOCK 74-1 zee-ZI Gene Eads, C.P.M. Purchasing Manager